Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 .Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Germany. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. electrical. and plumbing fixtures. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and piping. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. such as duct. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. 3 . and plumbing engineering workflows. electrical panels. such as mechanical equipment.

such as templates and families. On the Contents tab. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. For example. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Metric file names have an _m suffix. After completing each exercise. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. is located and accessed in the training files location. as well as how to open and save them. and tags. views. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. You do not design entire systems. Create schedules. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. In this exercise. you learn where the training files are located. When you open a training file. NOTE Depending on your installation. and sheets to document the project. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. however. annotations. For example. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. when you add ductwork. your Training folder may be in a different location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. to provide a richer and more finished design. Create detail views. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. However. templates. you can choose to save your work. So. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Contact your CAD manager for more information. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise.

8 If you have made changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Open. enter the new file name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. For example. and click Save. scroll down. 4 Click the training file name. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. click ➤ Save As. Accessing Training Files | 5 . the Open dialog displays. 3 In the right pane.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. you are prompted to save the changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and you can open any supported file type. a list of file types displays.rvt. and click the Training Files icon. double-click Imperial or Metric. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.rvt) is selected. verify that Project Files (*. You may close the file with or without saving changes. For Files of type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt and make changes. For File name. select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.

6 .

Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and phases when you need it. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. If the length of the elevation is changed. drawing sheets. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. every drawing sheet. and schedules required for a building project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You learn the terminology. drawings. scope. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. 2D and 3D view. ■ ■ 7 . quantities. the hierarchy of elements. and plans. hence. schedules. the parameter is one of association or connection. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the operation of the software is parametric. the door retains this relationship to the partition. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In the Revit MEP model. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. sections. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. As you work in drawing and schedule views. If you move the partition. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the floor or roof remains connected. In this case.

levels. ducts. boilers. sprinklers. Examples include detail lines. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the design. sprinklers. For example. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tags. boilers. and keynotes are annotation elements. They help to describe or document the design. For example. sinks.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ducts. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. and 2D detail components. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. grids. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and electrical panels. For example. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. Datum elements help to define project context. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and electrical panels. tags. filled regions. When you change something. dimensions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. For example.

from geometry to construction data. programming is not required. The project file contains all information for the building design. floors. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. North . Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and so forth). Project: In Revit MEP. schedules. This information includes components used to design the model. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. section views. or bottom of foundation. top of wall. you must be in a section or elevation view. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. In other cases. and drawings of the design. To place levels. Most often. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and ceilings.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. If you can draw. elevation views. you do nothing to establish these relationships. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. For example. for example. In Revit MEP. Often. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you can explicitly control them. views of the project. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. families. such as roofs. By using a single project file. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. However. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. first floor. and types. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.

and similar graphical representation. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Then experiment with them. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Type: Each family can have several types. showing. and wires. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. hiding. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). identical use. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. For example. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. For example. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. With a few clicks. A type can be a specific size of a family. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Unlike system and standard component families. You can also display several project views at one time. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. A type can also be a style. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. However. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. System families can be transferred between projects. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. pipes. System families include ducts. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks.

To return the panel to the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.

then select what you want to modify. data and systems. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements..Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for editing existing elements. and CAD files. When working on the Modify tab. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and settings. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. project and system parameters. select the tool first. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. architect-specific tools. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and for switching views.

displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. By default. displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. when adding duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. For example. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. provides access to common tools. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded.

such as Export and Publish. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to... (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Open) save the current drawing. (Export) On the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a template and create a new drawing. select a file to open. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click...

click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. Camera.. annotation. To enable or disable a tool item. or template file. but is not enabled by default... customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click. saves a current project.On the application menu. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. to. or template file. family. provides views including Default 3D. and Walkthrough. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. publish the current project. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Licensing) close the file. (Print) access product and license information.

workshared components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. However. when you switch to another editing mode. Modify. When you are highlighting an element or component. or the Family Editor. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. To show the Status Bar again. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . a tool tip appears next to the cursor. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. displaying the same information. Clipboard. When you are using a command. In addition. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Starting with the most recent command. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). To hide the Status Bar. Group. This displays the command history in a list. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. check the Status Bar.To undo or redo a series of operations. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. repeat the command. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Clear the Status Bar check mark.

On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. click (Modify). including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.To cancel or exit the current command. for example. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. select one or more elements of the same category. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Place a Wall. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. When you place an element in a drawing. To change existing elements to a different type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.

Zoom the view In the tutorials. For example. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps. 1 Click ➤ Open.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.rvt. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 Click Zoom Out (2x). If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Modifying the View | 19 . the view zooms in on the selected area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. this is referred to as a crossing selection. In the drawing area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click . The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. To modify or add snap increments. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. on the Navigation bar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. When you release the mouse button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.

13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. ➤ Options. press ESC. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Click and drag to orbit the design. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 14 To exit the wheel. moving the wheel to the desired location.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. and click tin the Options dialog. As you move the mouse. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and then using the Zoom tool again.

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.HVAC Plan .Design. These are the drag controls. Small blue dots.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display along the ends. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When drawing or modifying an MEP design. 2 Enter ZR. called drag controls. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . After you are familiar with these tasks. bottoms. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. referred to as shape handles. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and open Level 2 . and select the duct. Similar controls.

Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. Move. In this example. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).3 Click and drag the bottom control. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 6 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar.

Some commands. as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. In this case. 10 Move the cursor to the right. such as Move and Copy. and drag it to the left as shown. for example.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position.

Return. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Mechanical . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.End a command Some commands. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 14 Enter VG. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. For example. Click OK. Press ESC twice. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 13 To end a command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Modify Ducts command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

and loadable families. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. link files. New projects inherit all the families. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. 6 Click OK. under Template file. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. system families. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. such as coordination review and interference checking. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template.rte template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. In that case. such as the default project units and settings. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. click Browse. You can choose from several templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. under Create new. and geometry from the starting template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. such as ducts and pipes. settings. and modify system settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. the default building levels and standard views. select Project. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. create and manage views. Finally. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. 27 . 5 In the New Project dialog. You can either select a template from the template library. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Training files. use copy/monitor.

In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Manchester. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 10 Using the same method. click (Browse). ■ ■ Under Create new. select Project template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. navigate to Imperial Templates. for City. you can select it now. For Location. Click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). NH. ■ For Building Construction. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. review the construction materials listed. under Energy Analysis. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. If you want to use a template other than the default. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Click OK twice. For example. select Level 1. select School or University. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Energy Data. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 8 In the drawing area. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and open North. click Browse. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. create another new project using the Construction template.7 In the Project Browser. When you select the material. click Edit. In the Choose Template dialog. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Click Cancel.rte template and click Open. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. (Browse). Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools.

for 3 1/2". For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Identity Data. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. select Views. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Pipe Settings. and 5 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 26 In the right pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. click Wiring. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. plumbing. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 22 In the right pane. 11 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 27 Click OK. Click OK twice.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. 4 1/2". Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. For Categories. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and demand factors for electrical systems. 4 1/2". Holding CTRL. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 12 1/2". Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. piping. click Round. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 10 1/2". for 3 1/2". for 3/4". After standard settings have been established for an organization. power distribution systems. 24 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane. 33 Click OK.rfa and click Open. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 25 In the left pane. 5 1/2". click Sizes. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and fire protection systems. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. click Rectangular. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. wiring.

select Family and Type. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . sheets.Origin to Origin. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Sort by. select View Name. In addition.rvt. families. 5 Click OK. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. You need to create the MEP model for the project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Click Open. To enable this coordination. under Create new. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. under Template file. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. For Then by. 38 Close the file. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. For Then by. Linking Projects In this exercise. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Auto . select Sub-Discipline.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. click Training. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. and groups that are contained in a project. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. click Browse. select Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Associated Level. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Select Ascending Click OK twice. From the Positioning list.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library.11 In the Places dialog. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load. and click (Browse). Save. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and select it as the library path. and Import dialogs. templates. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and click OK twice. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and change the name to My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 15 Under Library Name. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. or families. and click Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click My Library. ➤ Open. click (Add Value). click the My Library icon.

(Remove Value) to delete the library. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 9 In the text editor. 22 Select My Library. click the Spelling tab. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 20 Click ➤ Options. 21 On the File Locations tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 11 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Places. select Ignore words in uppercase. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 5 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 14 Click in the drawing area. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Edit. such as bump maps. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. If you want to relocate this path. 2 In the Options dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 23 Click 24 Click OK. If you work in a large office. This path is determined during installation. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Settings. custom color files. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 27 Click OK. specify the new location here. and decal image files. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 8 Under Building industry dictionary.

Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 2 In the New Project dialog. 23 In the text editor. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click OK. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.17 In the Spelling dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. and enter 1 . and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click the Spelling tab. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 20 Under Settings. work with snapping turned off. 18 Click ➤ Options. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 25 Close the file without saving it. 19 In the Options dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. 22 In the text editor. under Template file. click Browse. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Training Files. under Dimension Snaps. 21 Under Personal dictionary. As you zoom in and out within a view. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Close.rte. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. you modify snap increments.. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Edit. delete sheetmtl-CU. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.

You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and move the cursor to the right. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If you do not have a wheel button.7 Under Object Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 10 On the Options Bar. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. zoom out until it does so. snapping reverts to the system default settings. For example. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. TIP To zoom while sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click OK. While sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If it does not. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. deselect Chain. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . This is the increment that you added previously. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter SM. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.

18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 22 Move the cursor downward. Notice that snapping is once again active. it will snap to the endpoints. the midpoint. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and specify the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and delete the value 1’ . 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. and move the cursor to the right. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 26 Close the file.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Do not set the wall end point. and the wall edges. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 25 Click OK. 19 Enter SM.. with or without saving it.

43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. However. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. duct system and a hydronic piping system. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you can choose to save your work. you will understand the process. This system consists of a cooling tower. water source heat pump (WSHP). Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. methodology. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. go to http://www. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you first plan the system. 45 . In this lesson. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. As you create the mechanical system.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. After finishing each exercise. At the end of the tutorial. After applying a color scheme to the zones. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you first configure the linked architectural model. and then you create a plenum level. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 1 In the Project Browser. roof. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. click to select it. and after the linked model highlights. click Training Files. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. ceilings. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you add a level for plenums. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan is highlighted. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Room Bounding. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. NOTE When working with a linked file. In this section. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. These components are defined in the architectural training file. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. under Constraints. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. not in the MEP training file.

The new level is placed. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. For Offset. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). enter 8'. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and enter Level 2 Plenum. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and in the Plan View Types dialog. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click West .6 In the Project Browser. 16 Press Esc. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click OK. Click Plan View Types. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Preparing Spaces | 47 . and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 On the Draw panel. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views.MEP. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template).

The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. you place spaces in areas of the building model. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select MEP . enter an Offset of 1' 0". You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. you can choose to save your work. 20 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for View Range. For View Classification. However. For Sub-Discipline. Under View Depth. enter 0. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Extents. In this exercise. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. and click Properties. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. for Default View Template.Plenum. click Edit. NOTE After finishing each exercise. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select Design. and for Offset.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. For Cut plane. select Plenum Plan. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for View Scale. ■ Click OK twice. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. for Top. select Level Above (Level 3). for Level. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and click Apply Default View Template. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In the next exercise. In this exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Under Identity Data. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. enter 0. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. For Offset. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. walls. For (Tag Location). Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2 Plenum. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. Placing Spaces | 49 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Upper Limit. select Horizontal. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Space. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and ceilings). select New.

ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space. 14 In the drawing area. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 219. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK.7 Click to place the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Number.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

enter 0. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Upper Limit. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. Placing Spaces | 51 .15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. and then click Modify.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 23 Click OK. you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.

2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. enter 0. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. and for Offset. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. select Level 3. click Training Files.rvt. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted. and then press Esc. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. which was numbered 219Q. as shown. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and press Enter. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. change the space number to 216A. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. the plan view would have updated with the changes. enter Corridor. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Using the same method. 9 In the floor plan. double-click the space name. and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Close the schedule view.

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously.15 Press Esc twice. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place a space in a chase. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. indicating that it’s the active view. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Space Plan is highlighted. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. If necessary. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

and click Element Properties. click in the chase area to place the space. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. for Upper Limit. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. For Offset. enter 4'. for Upper Limit. 6 Enter VG. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. In the plan view. select Level 3. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select the space. Under Identity Data. On the Options Bar. enter 0. select Interior and Reference. 12 Click in the section view. enter Chase. right-click. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 In the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Name. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . For Limit Offset.4 Press Esc. expand Spaces. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. For Number. select Roof Level. enter 225PC. and then click OK.

You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. floors. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. and maximize the view. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercises. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.Bounding elements (such as walls. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select Space Tag With Volume. All spaces in the view are tagged.Space Plan. ceilings. 17 Type ZF. 15 Press Esc. and click OK. under Loaded Tags.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. To display space reference lines. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. under Spaces. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). After a space is placed in an area. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.rvt. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click Training Files. which removes the space from the Default zone. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click View ➤ Zones. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.

Using the Edit Zone tab. and click Finish Editing Zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. As you do this. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The graphic in the System Browser updates.5 In the System Browser. and modify the zone properties.Zoning is highlighted. and verify the zones in the System Browser. and a new zone is created. select Occupiable. Instruction 221. under Spaces. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. indicating that the space is occupiable. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. you assign spaces to a zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under Energy Analysis. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. To display space reference lines. The Zone tool is active. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you can add or remove a space from the zone. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next. 4 In the drawing area. the Edit Zone tab displays. select Computer Lab 222. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.

type VG. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 5 With the drawing area active. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Expand HVAC Zones. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you need to activate the zone visibility. Click OK. To view the zone in the drawing area.In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Instruction. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.

click Training Files. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. under Spaces. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. enter 2 . click Reference. click Finish Editing Zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. To display space reference lines. for Name.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.West . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.West . under Identity Data.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and click OK. You activated zone visibility in the views. In this exercise. expand 2 .Zoning is highlighted. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 9 In the System Browser.Area B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 11 Close the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 8 In the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.5 Click in the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning floor plan. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 15 Press Esc. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. zoom out. Select Attached End. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. click in the Level 2 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view to activate it.Zoning view. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.

and zone information. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning to make it the active view. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. space. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. on the ViewCube. Front. click Training Files. for Name Value. click the corner where the Top. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. double-click the zone tag.rvt. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.Zoning view. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.East. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click Level 1 . enter Lounge . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. you verify the building. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.

You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. With 109 Lounge selected. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. you isolate the space. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Click (Highlight). and select 109 Lounge. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate).4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Using the Highlight tool. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. verify that Wireframe is selected. Next.

select 109 Lounge. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that <Building> is selected. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Next. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and click OK. and in the People dialog. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. click . the space information displays for the selected space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person).■ On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. select 1_South_Lounge. Below the list of spaces and zones. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Construction Type. and then click OK. and then click OK. For People. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click . ■ ■ ■ Next. For Electrical Loads. click . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select Lounge/Recreation.

verify that 74.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. outdoor air per area. and air changes per hour. floors. heating air temperature. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. For Cooling Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone.00 °F : N/A is specified. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that 70. This indicates the outdoor air per person. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .00 °F : 54. cooling air temperature. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Heating Information. and humidification set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Next. 12 Using the methods learned previously. roofs. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. This indicates the heating set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.00 °F : 90.00 °F : N/A is specified. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and dehumidification set point. verify that <Building> is selected. click (Shading). verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and other room-bounding components. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.

Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Plenum. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Click OK. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. click Cancel. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. open MEP . Because this is an unoccupied space. Under Energy Analysis. Under Energy Analysis. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Level 3. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). enter 0. For Offset. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. enter 212P. for Number. select Plenum. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 15 In the Project Browser.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Name. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.

23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click in the Value field. select School or University. double-click Level 2 . On the Place tab. for City.Space Plan. is selected. and zone information. space. you verified building. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Postal Code. click Edit. under Energy Analysis. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. For Location. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. NH. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.rvt. and verify that the space has replaced the void. enter 03101.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and select space Plenum 212P. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. verify that Manchester. In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. for Energy Data.

you need to select this option. verify that Level 1 is selected. select Specified. For Ground Plane. click in the Value column. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. For Project Phase. enter 200 Btu/h. For Space Type. ft. Under Heat Gain (per Person).When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. Click OK twice.Audio Visual. In order to select a space. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. If. and click OK. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select space Library 219. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. for Values. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Building Construction. select Heated and cooled. For Export Complexity. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and enter 50 sq. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. a cooling load. For Latent. this option adjusts the times automatically. ■ On the Weather tab. verify that New Construction is selected. and click OK. and click OK. for Values. and then click . verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. both. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for Building Service. For Condition Type. enter 150 Btu/h. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Volume Computations. 8 In the drawing area. select Specified. click Edit. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that <Building> is specified. and click Element Properties. or neither. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Sensible. select Library . For People. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. right-click. Select Area per person. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 1' 0" is specified. For Sliver Space Tolerance.

Revit MEP stores this information as project information. select Actual. and can be modified here. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Values. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. is specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Edit. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . For Building Service. You have verified the building information. verify that <Building> is specified. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that School or University is selected. Under Power. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You should correct the space error in the building model. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Information). There should be no warnings displayed. and click to learn the cause for the warning. and click OK. NH. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. click Calculate. For Building Construction. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 12 Click the Details tab. Select the space associated with the warning. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog).■ ■ ■ Click OK. Click OK twice. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. and under Heating Information. for Values. For Location. select 219 Library. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Actual. verify that Manchester. For Electrical Loads. Next. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. weather. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select 219 Library. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Click OK. or zone information. For Color Scheme. and zone information for the building model.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 21 Click OK. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 17 In the loads report.Space Plan. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 3 In the drawing area. 16 After you review the loads report. space. select HVAC Zones. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. under Energy Analysis. space. 15 Review the loads report for project. 19 In the drawing area. In this exercise. click to the right of the building to place the legend.rvt. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. click Training Files. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and a loads report displays. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. or make any changes to the model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.

5 Zoom in to the legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . The new scheme displays in the view. in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select the color scheme legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. select Tonnage Range. under Schemes.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 11 Using the method learned previously.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise.rvt.12 Close the file with or without saving it. more category options are available. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. for Select available fields from. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Phase.Space Fill is the active view. Select Schedule building components. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. select New Construction. enter Space Airflow Schedule. For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select Spaces. Click OK. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 .

Header. select HVAC. and then click . add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula.■ Under Available fields.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select Airflow Delta. click (Browse). For Formula. For Discipline. In the Fields dialog. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Number. select Not Between. select Level. For Then by. For Fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Type. In the Schedule Properties dialog. and Blank line. In the Calculated Value dialog. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Click OK. for Formula. enter . Select Ascending. select Level. enter Airflow Delta. select Air Flow. and then select Hidden field. and then click Conditional Format. ■ Click Calculated Value. and click OK. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. Select Formula. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.

■ The schedule displays. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM.■ ■ ■ For Value. verify that Show is highlighted. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. select red. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. right-click to access schedule properties. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. For Background Color. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Click OK twice. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. a view opens that contains the selected space. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In the next lesson. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and click OK. Under Conditions to Use. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. click the color swatch. In the Color dialog. In this exercise.

78 .

you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. 79 . After system creation. you will create supply air systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. As you place the air terminals. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and work with the airflow schedule. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. indicating that it’s the active view. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the ceiling view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and scroll to space 223.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

type 12. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. click Place on Face. enter 425 CFM. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and press Enter. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Rectangular Face Round Neck . and then select both Copy and Multiple. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . verify that Constrain is cleared. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 13 On the Options Bar. If the host element is modified or moved. 17 Move the cursor down. Also. the hosted elements are updated as well. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the diffuser.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and select Supply Diffuser . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar. which in this case is the ceiling grid.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. as shown. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . for Flow. and then press Esc to end the command. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 9 On the Placement panel.

Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM.rfa. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. as shown. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 Place 2 diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. As you place the return diffusers. click Yes. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and then press Esc. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 22 In the drawing area. click Place on Face. clear Leader. Next. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 25 In the drawing area. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. select one of the diffusers. and click Open. 21 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Placement tab.

Level. 31 In the alert dialog. and click OK. and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. as shown. select one of the return diffusers. select Strong Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 32 In the Project Browser. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. for Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

41 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 9' 0"2750. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. click the Level 1 line. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 44 Zoom in to space 115. for Constraints ➤ Offset.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. ■ ■ For the end point. and click OK. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.

verify that Design ➤ HVAC . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. After creating the logical connection. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. When you highlight a space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You then create the logical connection between the system components. the space crossing lines display. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including energy analysis. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.HVAC Plan . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. However.Press Esc. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. right-click the title. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. In this exercise. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click View ➤ Systems. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building.

12 In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and Flow value. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Connect Into. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. review the Number of Elements. As you add diffusers to systems. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 15 Click Cancel. On the Options Bar. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 11 In the drawing area. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. System Name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. the number of elements is updated.

25 Click OK. 22 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Rename the system Next. for System Name. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. under Mechanical. and the system connects them. the air terminals are the children. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 18 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for Mark. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Identity Data. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise. In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.

the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan. for Solution Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). When you highlight a space using the cursor. which provides various layout tools. and display solution 1. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. click Training Files.rvt. select the upper left diffuser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the Network type provides several solutions.Design is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Network. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the drawing area. In this case. Also.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. A Generate Layout tab displays.

9 On the Generate Layout panel.Round. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 9' 10 1/2". If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Duct Type. For Offset.7 On the Options Bar. you’ll get an error in a later step. For Flex Duct Type. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Flex Duct Round : Flex . click Settings. For Offset. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. enter 3'. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Modify. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. Select Branch. as shown. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Click OK. For Duct Type.

For example. Either relocate the system components. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. as is the elbow itself. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the duct. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.11 Click Finish Layout. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .

17 In the Type Properties dialog. fittings. If the entire network does not highlight. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and click to select it.Flow. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. for Values Displayed. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. select By View. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click OK. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. but not all values are used in this view. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and equipment. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and then click OK. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. under Graphics. Using a flow-based color scheme. a disconnection exists. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. select Duct Color Fill . 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Color Scheme. Usually. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. thus it is not part of the system. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. The first time you press Tab. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.

Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click OK. and then press Esc to clear the selection. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Mechanical . decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. select the color scheme legend. for Schemes. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and press Enter. 26 Click OK. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers in the system. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 In the drawing area.Airflow. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM).The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select Duct Color Fill .Velocity. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and on the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select the WSHP.

highlight a segment of the duct. select Friction. and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Calculated Size Only. and select 16". and enter . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Click OK. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.08 in-wg/100ft. Select Restrict Height. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Cancel.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. for Branch Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Under Constraints. Select Only. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and drag it to the right.

static pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using this tool. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Use the information that displays (flow. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. so that you can modify the system design accordingly.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .NOTE As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. click Training Files. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.rvt. 35 Click Finish. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select the WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan . and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

right-click the connector grip.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. select 9' 10 1/2". Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.3D MEP. select the top right diffuser. NOTE When drawing duct. Front. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 15 On the ViewCube. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. for Offset. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Draw Duct. 11 On the Options Bar. double-click MEP . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . click the corner where the Top. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.

19 In the drawing area. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 22 Using the same method. in space 115.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. The ductwork is automatically created. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Also. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).

You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.

and then click Modify.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and click to select it. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).

select a segment of the main duct. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. and click OK. such as a plenum. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Constraints. for Flow. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click OK.Airflow. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.

Then. In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. 109 . Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Create return and supply piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 base mounted pumps.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. you place mechanical equipment.rvt. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. on level 3 of the building model. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

2-6 Tons . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. in corridor 328.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Horizontal .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. as shown.High Efficiency .Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and select WSHP . 7 On the Options Bar. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Left Return . verify that Wall faces is selected. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view.

and in the Type Selector. and enter 2'. verify that the WSHP is still selected.8 Click the corridor wall face. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 10 Select the WSHP. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown. as shown.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. and click to place the dimension. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. click the top edge of the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Offset. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 9'. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. enter 12 GPM. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . select the 2 WSHPs. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Click OK. Under Mechanical.14 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

you create the return and supply piping systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.21 Click Modify. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create the logical connection between the system components.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. right-click the Systems column heading. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. where it is easier to review the information.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You can create pipes to connect system components.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 In the System Browser. analyses cannot be performed. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Unlike logical connections (systems). but without a corresponding system. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Mech 330). Creating a Piping System | 115 . and click View ➤ Piping.

11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. while pressing Ctrl. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Therefore. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Assigning a system component to an existing system. As you assign equipment to systems. for System Name. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the drawing area. select the 2 WSHPs. and the Edit System tool is not active. Notice that on the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.In the System Browser. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. This display indicates that the system is selected. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.

for System Name. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Creating a Piping System | 117 . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan .Design.13 Click Finish Editing System. double-click Roof . You have created the hydronic return system. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 19 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. and select the cooling tower. under Design ➤ HVAC .

23 Close the roof plan view. In heating mode. 25 Select the boiler. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . expand the Hydronic Return system category.22 In the Select Connector dialog. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and click Select. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click OK. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and bypasses the cooling tower. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). indicating the logical connection. and click Expand All. 29 Right-click CHWS. 28 Using the same method. In cooling mode.

and click Column Settings. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. for Water Flow. and click Properties.In the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you can view several parameters. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click OK. under Mechanical. 32 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. including the flow rate and size of the component. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. enter 18 GPM. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. expand Piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click OK.

select CHWR. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. the boiler. then the Select a System dialog displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. press Tab to highlight the system. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. When you draw a box to select components. A system preview displays in red. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.Mech 330). Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and click to select it. select Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Select a System dialog.Design is highlighted. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 10 Click OK. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 5 In the Filter dialog. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). Notice that all components within the Level 3 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.HVAC Plan .rvt. you can place the cursor over a system component. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. click Check None. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.

click Settings. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. enter 1' 6''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architectural components. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. duct. 13 Click Cancel. structural beams.11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. It does not reference the architecture. 14 On the Generate Layout tab.

122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for one WSHP is 18. and the flow for the other is 12.16 Click Finish Layout. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. With each Tab. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 17 Optionally. to display the path with thinner lines. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 19 In the drawing area. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.

24 Press Esc. 22 Select the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and access its instance properties. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . under Mechanical. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM.

124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . double-click Level 1 . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 27 On the System Tools panel. Logically. the Number of Elements is now 8. 28 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Next. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.Design. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.Design ➤ Floor Plans. which propagates flow throughout the system. 32 Click Finish Editing System. you physically close the CHWR loop. click Edit System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. access its instance properties. as shown. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 35 Using the drag control.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. select a WSHP. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. under Mechanical.

enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. and then click OK. For Inset. select CHWS. enter 1' 6''. enter 0''/12''. Click Settings. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. For Slope. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 41 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.40 In the Select a System dialog.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. In a later exercise. 46 Click Modify. (Both sections are at the same elevation. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 47 In the drawing area. as shown.

you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. To create the piping system. Add piping to close the supply loop. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. 51 Click Finish Layout. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). or offset elevations are incorrect. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Either relocate the system components.50 Using the same method. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or manually modify the pipe.

Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design ➤ 3D Views. and the return pipes are magenta. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. As you work in the training file. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.rvt. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. double-click 3D HVAC Building.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete.

Click to specify the reference point. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. select the boiler.

Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 13 In the plan view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 12 In the 3D view. and the lower one is secondary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). The connections are automatically created. and click OK. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the boiler. select the return pipe riser. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

7''. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 1' . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and press Enter. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and you select 1 connector. for Offset. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 2'. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ Move the cursor down.In a plan view. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.

and select it. and click OK.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 18 Press Esc twice. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select the primary base mounted pump. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. as shown. and the appropriate fittings are created. 19 In the plan view. As you place piping runs that are close together. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump. and click Draw Pipe. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. 27 Move the cursor to the right. right-click the bottom connector.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and when the connector point displays. 29 If necessary. and click to draw the pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. you select the tee fitting. 28 Press Esc. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. right-click the discharge connector. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe.

35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. type 1'. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and press Enter. enter 9' 6''. and click to create the pipe. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

you validate the flow through the system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. Next. right-click. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click Element Properties. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. You now have a closed loop system.

as shown. the value is 0 GPM. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 or 50% of the Flow. under Mechanical. 48 In the plan view. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and click OK. 43 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. notice that under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . view the properties for the secondary pump. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 41 Using the same method. 46 Press Esc. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. right-click. 44 In the 3D view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 42 Click OK.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect the cooling tower Next. When you create the pumps in parallel. 40 Click Cancel. for Cooling Water Flow.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

50 In the 3D View. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). the water bypasses the cooling tower. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise. and is heated by the boiler. and close the dialog. When the valve is open. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc twice. as shown. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 4 On the Options Bar. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. Adding Valves | 143 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.

parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. In heating mode. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Adding Valves | 145 . and select Ball Valve . and click Element Properties.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Using the same method. under Mechanical. and click OK. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. right-click. and select Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.

rvt. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.Design is highlighted. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Initially. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan . 23 Close the file with or without saving it.22 Using the method you just learned. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. indicating that it’s the active view.

Sizing Pipe | 147 . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Flow.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Size. and click OK. for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Pipe Color Fill . click Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.

Click OK. for Branch Sizing. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and for Velocity. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Under Constraints.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.25 FT/100ft. enter 5 FPS. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. and click to select the branch. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Select And. and enter 2.

14 Close the file with or without saving it. Either relocate the system components. Using the System Inspector. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 149 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.rvt. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. pressure. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspecting the System In this exercise. or offset elevations are incorrect.Design ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 3D HVAC Building.

This information helps you modify the system design. flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and pressure information including pressure loss. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. as required. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown.88 psi. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and the Pressure Loss is 1. inspect Section 6 again. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and click OK. for Fluid Temperature.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and to size pipe. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. the Static Pressure is 7. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 10 Click Finish.89 psi. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Using the same method.67 psi. select 90° F. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you need to validate them. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. targeting those systems that need attention.

9 Right-click CHWS. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.Design ➤ Floor Plans. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. After you have assigned all components to systems. and click View. thus assigning the components to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and for pipe sizing. 7 In the System Browser. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. If you place components without assigning them to a system.rvt. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. After you assign components to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. As you learned when placing components. click Training Files. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and double-click Level 3 . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). In the System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 4 In the System Browser. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.HVAC Plan . Warnings display. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and click Show to view all of the system components. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.Design. For example. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.

Design floor plan. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and select Level 3 . expand the Unassigned folder. right-click Hydronic Return. click Close. 10 Using the same methods.HVAC Plan . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Expand All. 12 In the System Browser. otherwise. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and confirm unassigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

select 90. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ Click New Correction Factor. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK. As you place components and create circuits. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.04. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. ■ ■ For Material.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. wiring. speeding up the design phase. and demand factors that are applied in the design. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. distribution systems. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Temperature Rating. enter THHN. select Wiring Types. enter 1.Wire Sizes. expand Wiring . and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. You also add a wiring type. select Copper. select 75. ■ ■ For Factor. click (Open).rvt. Select Correction Factor. select Copper. For Temperature. In this exercise you review electrical settings. For Material.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

Click Background Color. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ ■ For Value. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. for Custom Colors. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK three times.

167 . These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. as you place lighting fixtures.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create a panel schedule. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Then. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. First. power circuits.

00 fc. 2 In the drawing area. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. In the Color dialog.00 fc.rvt. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By using orange as the color for this range.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Average Estimated Illumination.Lighting Color Fill view is open. select the color legend. for the Spaces Category. click Training Files. select the color for Less Than 20. for Basic Colors. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. You can create additional color schemes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select Orange. Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Scheme Definition. click (Open).

zoom to space Library 219.277. The red field will clear once the +/. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 8 In the Project Browser. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 13 Click the Level 2 .277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .5 fc range is satisfied. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. which is the lowest value in the specified range. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.5 fc range. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.7 In the Project Browser. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling plan.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

In the Space Lighting Analysis view. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 20 Select the lighting fixture. select Multiple.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click to place the fixture. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the fixtures will move accordingly. 23 Click OK. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select Multiple. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 28 In the drawing area.

Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

36 In the Filter dialog.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK. click Check None.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. select Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

42 In the drawing area. click the ceiling grid line as shown. select Multiple Alignment. The lighting delta is satisfied. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. 41 On the Options Bar.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. click (Open). In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click Training Files.45 Press ESC to end the command. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Color Fill plan. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. scroll to view space space Library 219. 2 Tile the views as shown.

7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. for Type Mark. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.277V and click OK. Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. In the Name dialog. ■ Under Photometrics.ies and click Open. specify 15000. Under Electrical. enter . select T5 [HO].00 VA. for Ballast Loss Factor. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ Click OK twice. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Color Preset. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. click the value for Initial Color. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. enter F15. ■ Click Apply.00 lm. Under Photometrics. Click OK. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. select Xenon and click OK. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . and click OK. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. select Luminous Flux. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .93. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Apparent Load. for Lamp. Under Photometrics. select 463T5_S.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. In the Select File dialog. enter 162. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. enter .85.

Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and for Category. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. 10 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . select the top center fixture. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Note the lighting delta updates again. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.Press Delete. 15 In space Library 219.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

Junction Boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.rvt. In the next exercise. and Receptacles | 183 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. junction boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.Press Delete. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. 2 In the drawing area. and receptacles to your design. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you add switches. click (Open). Placing Switches.

5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. 7 Click to place the switch. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 9 Press ESC to end the command.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. The element type Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open.NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 . 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Click Edit Type. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . zoom to space Library 219. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK twice. 21 In the drawing area. Under Electrical. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Type Properties dialog. enter 9’0”.Offset. for Level 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Mark. 15 Select the junction box. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. enter JB-1NL. NOTE When entering values. note the Number of Poles is 1.14 Press ESC to end the command. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Junction Boxes. and Number of Elements. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. Select Size. 24 For any column. Space Number. 23 In the System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Click OK. Expand Electrical. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Receptacles | 187 . NOTE If necessary. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Distribution System. and Voltage.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Space Name. Expand General. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Load. 26 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. right-click and click Column Settings.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

Placing Switches. 40 On the Options Bar. and Receptacles | 189 .The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.

42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 .

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.rvt.equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 2 In the drawing area. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Adding wiring to a project is optional.

12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. for Max. enter PP-2B. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 8 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name. enter 20. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. select 480/277 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard.

Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 In the drawing area. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. enter LP-2B. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221. which is the logical connection between the elements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. and for Category. for Max. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. #1 Pole Breakers. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. enter 20. 23 In the Filter dialog. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. 41 In the Filter dialog. except without wire.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click Check None. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. enter 2. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. click (Open). 44 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. select Wires. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and for Category. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Hot Conductors. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Expand Electrical.rvt. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 2 In the drawing area. and then expand circuit 1. Rating. Distribution System. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. right-click on the Systems heading. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and Voltage Drop are selected. Voltage. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 In the System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. expand Power. click Training Files. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. and verify that Load. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

Click OK. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 22 With the junction box still selected. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the Voltage to 277V. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.

click below the first one to place it. Click Tags. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Yes. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. enter FR4. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 47 In the drawing area. under Identity Data. for Type Mark. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 44 In the Edit Label dialog.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 40 Click OK twice. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click Edit Type.

53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and click Apply. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. click Check None. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. enter a comma. 52 In the Save As dialog. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click OK. 56 In the Filter dialog. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Click Save.rfa. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. select Lighting Fixture Tags. For Circuit Number. select Break. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. for File Name. Next you create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Click OK.

5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter a. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical Lighting. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click Training Files. for Switch ID.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. click (Open). 9 Select the occupancy sensor.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 .

20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK. for switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.Lighting. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. under Electrical . Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. enter b. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

and for Category. lighting. click Check None. 7 In space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 4 In the Filter dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Electrical Fixtures.26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 2 In the drawing area. select the PP-2B panel. click (Open). The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Circuits are used for power. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and data systems. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Creating Power Loads | 207 .

navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and click Open. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click Element Properties. 19 Click OK. and in the drawing area. select Wiring. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. under Electrical . 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. for Hot Conductors.Loads. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Long Wire Tick Mark.rfa. 13 Select the wire again. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. enter 2.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and in the right pane. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.

22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click to select the circuit. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.

28 In the drawing area. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.26 Press Delete. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click the connector of the first receptacle. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. in space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 29 In space Instruction 221.

click Open. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. select panel LP-2B. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 3 In the Electrical space. zoom to space Electrical 220.rvt.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Next you balance the loads for your design. Finally. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.

click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and Phase C . click Rebalance Loads. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#12.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. enter 30A. Notice that the loads on Phase A. Under Electrical-Loads. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.3616 VA). and Phase C provides 2028 VA. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Rating. 1-#10. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Scroll down. B. Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 1-#12. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Phase B 3636 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog.3712 VA. 6 Click OK. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected.

under Electrical . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. enter 25A. under Electrical . and click OK. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. for Rating. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Click OK. Select PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.Loads. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.15 Select panel PP-2B. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click (Open). 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. enter 30A. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. for Rating. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .

click Training Files. and open E601 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 Select the schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Under Header Text. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Font Size. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Appearance. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. click Edit. 4 Close the report. Under Body Text.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. for Font. select Berlin Sans FB. 5 In the Project Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. under Other. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 1/8. select Bold and Italic. for Font Size. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. enter 3/32. 11 Click OK twice. expand Sheets (all). Under Header Text. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. click (Open). under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.Panel Schedules.

and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. select space Lounge 212. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. Expand Unassigned. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. each with a load of 180VA. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Checking Your Design | 215 . In the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212.

17 In the drawing area. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. for Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. 16 Close the details dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 In the dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. under Warnings. 20 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. planning is critical to a successful design. right-click PVC . you create a PVC pipe type.Design is open. type PVC . in addition to loading existing families.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.rvt.Vent. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Adding a pipe size.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and verify that Level 1 . 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 4 In the Name dialog. and click OK. In this lesson. and click Properties. 219 .Sanitary.

The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.Sch 40 . Cross. and click Main. 26 Click OK. 18 For System Type.Vent is listed. enter 10°. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. for Material. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 24 For Inside Diameter. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 17 In the left pane. Tap. 15 For System Type. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 13 In the right panel. 6 Click OK. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter 5/8''. enter 27/32''. 10 On the Selection panel. 27 For the new pipe size. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. and click OK. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Tee Vent . enter -4' .DWV. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Plastic.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .DWV: Standard.PVC . In the Project Browser. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select Branch. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 1/2''.Sch 40 . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . PVC . click Training Files. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Mechanical.rfa. 25 For Outside. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. for Nominal. Tee. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Sanitary.0''. select Sanitary. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. click Pipe Settings.Sch 40 . select Tee. 22 Click New Size.PVC .PVC .DWV: Standard. under Pipe Types. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. For Offset. 21 In the right pane. select None. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.

vent.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system. including plumbing fixtures. 221 . and hot and cold water piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. add a hot water heater.

Plumbing Plan . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 1 urinal. and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you add 2 toilets. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . NOTE To identify a space name and number. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. including the men’s room (space Male 107). Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.

Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 5 On the Placement panel. as shown. select Public . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .Wall Mounted.Flush Valve . 4 On the Element panel. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. against the left wall.1. in the Type Selector. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.6 gpf. 1 wall-mounted urinal.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Water Closet . and 3 sinks.

Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. above the first in the standard toilet space. zoom in closer. (Again. and press Esc.7 Click to place another toilet. use the reference line to center the fixture. under Urinal .

Rectangular. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain . click Place on Face.

and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and review the components listed under this system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click in the System Browser table heading. a urinal. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 19 Expand Default Sanitary.rvt. and a floor drain. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. and Default Domestic Cold Water. In this exercise.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Design is open.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 2 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click OK. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and verify that Level 1 . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 8 In the Filter dialog.Plumbing Plan . Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ Floor Plans. clear Lines (<Overhead>).

If you deselected the drain. for System Name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 13 In the Systems Browser. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. You include the bathroom space number in the name. expand Sanitary. 12 On the Edit System panel. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. click Finish Editing System. so the Create Sanitary System is available.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. 11 On the Options Bar. enter Sanitary 107. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors.

at the midpoint of the detail lines. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click OK. for example. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed. select Sanitary 107. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. as shown. a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. select one of the components in the system.

and click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.19 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 24 In the left pane. click Solutions. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter -1' 0''. enter 1/8'' / 12''. You accept this suggested solution. select Main. for Offset. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. The default settings are automatically modified. and modify it to meet project requirements. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Solution Type. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Intersections. 27 Click Modify. select 4''. enter -1' 0''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Branch. for Diameter. 21 On Options Bar. for Slope. and click Settings. 23 For Offset. and for Offset. enter -4'-0”.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 31 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 38 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

5 On the Placement panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. under Lavatory . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan .Rectangular. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. and verify that Level 1 . select 22''x22'' .rvt. in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel.Public. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Design is open.

On the Options Bar. TIP When entering dimensions. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink. For example. select Multiple. 8 Select the sink. enter 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols.7 Click Modify. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. and press Enter to create the third sink. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 12 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Add To System. click Finish Editing System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Click the 3 sinks. Press Esc. 16 On the Edit System panel. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser.

Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Draw Pipe. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 19 In the 3D view. 21 Select the tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 22 In the plan view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view. with the tee fitting selected. double-click 3D Plumbing. as shown. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .In the System Browser.

26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. press Spacebar. enter 2' . for Slope.6''. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. In this example. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. When you press the Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 Click Modify. enter 1/8'' / 12''. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. for Offset. and click Apply.

30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify.Sch 40 .PVC . select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and when the vertical center line displays.DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. move the cursor over the stub pipe. click to place the fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double .

for Offset. and press Enter. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. 36 In the section view. In the next steps. enter 6''.33 With the fitting selected. you add pipe segments to the double wye. on the Options Bar. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 34 Press Esc. right-click the right connector. double-click the section head to open the section view. 37 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 1'.

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

and click Draw Pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. press Spacebar. 48 Click Modify. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Esc. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. enter 6''. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method.

50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Trap P . 55 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 54 Click Modify. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 .DWV. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. select the P-Trap on the left. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. select Standard. 53 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.PVC . 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.

. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. enter 6''. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. select the left P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. In the plan view. 58 Using the same method.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Move the cursor to the left. and click Draw Pipe. connect the right sink to the double wye. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.

select PVC Sanitary. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. In the Type Selector. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. as shown. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select a proposed solution. Press Esc.■ In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. click Finish to select the recommended solution. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl.

65 Close the file with or without saving it. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. for Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 On the Options Bar. adjusting the sanitary stack. and verify the slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files.

6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sch 40 .DWV. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. right-click the top connector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . click Modify. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .PVC . select the vertical stack.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Selector.Design. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Overall. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select Standard. as shown. 5 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe.Floor level line. 3 In the Section view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 10 In the 3D view.Design. 7 On the Selection panel. and click the intersection to place the fitting. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . select the elbow fitting on the right. and click to draw the pipe.

enter 1'-0”. select Standard. 14 On the Options Bar. under Plug . 15 Press Esc.DWV.11 Click Modify. for Offset. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 12 Select the fitting. as shown. 18 In the plan view.PVC . 13 Click the rotate control once.

click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

select Pipe Types: Water. 14 In the System Browser. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. expand Unassigned. 7 In the left pane. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Check None. urinal.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. minimize the Sanitary system. For Offset. select Branch. double-click 3D Plumbing . under Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 In the right pane. for System Type. For Offset. select Branch. enter 9' 3''. 17 In the Filter dialog. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click Main. for System Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 15 In the plan view. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Main. and sinks. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Hot Water.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Plumbing Fixtures. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. verify that the value is 9' 0''. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and for System Type. 6 In the left pane. if necessary. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.Design ➤ 3D Views. 9 In the left pane.Overall. select Domestic Cold Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Pipe Types: Water. select Domestic Hot Water. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.) 10 Click OK. and click OK. draw a selection box to select the toilets.

Notice that the water main displays in blue. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. click Edit System. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. click Finish Editing System. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 On the Edit System panel. For Flow Conversion Method. 19 On the System Tools panel. In the System Browser. enter DCW 107. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .

and click to place the pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. connect the second toilet. as shown. 33 Click Modify. For Offset. 35 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. click to the left of the urinal. enter 0”/12”. For Slope. enter 3' . 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe.2 7/8''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 37 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 30 In the plan view. and click the connector. right-click the top DCW connector. enter 10'. enter 4'0”. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.25 Using the same method. and press Enter. as shown. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 7''. at the intersection of the water main pipe. for Offset. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. select Water. select 3/4''. 34 In the plan view. under Pipe Types. select the sink above the urinal.

and click OK. 40 Click Modify. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 41 Select the top sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. add a water heater.

Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. while pressing Ctrl. 6 In the plan view. select the 3 sinks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Overall. 5 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.

in the Unassigned folder. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. When designing systems. Default Domestic Cold Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 12 In the Type Selector. verify that DCW 107 is selected.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. In later steps. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. as shown. 14 Click Modify. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.6 Gallon. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. and click OK. under Water Heater . Default Domestic Hot Water. for System Name. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.Tankless. you edit the system to add equipment. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 In the plan view. 15 In the System Browser.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. select 0. and click Edit System. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 10 In the System Browser. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

click Finish Editing System. Slope: 0''/12''. as shown. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 27 Click Modify. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . right-click the middle left connector. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and press Enter. 19 Select the water heater. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. Offset: 4' 6''. 23 On the Options Bar. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. 22 In the Type Selector. 25 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. for Offset. and click the water main line. and select Draw Pipe. select the water heater. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 24 Move the cursor up. and on the Edit System panel. enter 10’.

for Diameter. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 37 On the Options Bar. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. select a sink. enter 1' 6''. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and in the System Selector. select 4'-6''. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 35 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. 33 On the Edit System panel. click Edit System. and on the Placement Tools panel. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and for Offset. and press Enter. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Offset. select Domestic Hot Water 107. enter 9' 0''. 36 Move the cursor down. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1''.

enter 2' 8''. for Offset. 40 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. 41 Move the cursor down. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 42 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor down.

select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. After finishing each exercise.rvt. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In this tutorial. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 267 . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. and click Duplicate. click Training Files. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson.autodesk. However.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present. 2 Right-click Standard. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You create a new pipe type. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.

Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. structural beams. click Rename. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. and enter Fire Protection Wet. for Material. under Mechanical. In the left pane. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Offset. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Carbon Steel. 9 Click OK. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. For System Type. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. duct. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and then click OK. For Pipe Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the next exercise. For Pipe Type. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you modify the type properties of the pipe. Next. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. select Main. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For Offset. However. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. For System Type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. or architectural components.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Spaces. enter Zone 1. right-click. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and click Element Properties. select Fire Protection. select space Instruction 221 as shown. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.rvt. for Name. 8 Using a crossing window. and then click OK. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the upper half of the building. enter Sprinkler Zone. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Under Categories.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Click OK twice. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. the space crossing lines display. For Group parameter under. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Fire Protection Plan . click Add.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and then click OK. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that only Spaces are selected.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Sprinkler Zone. 10 In the Filter dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. and then access instance properties. and click OK. including a calculated value parameter. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. enter Zone 2. under Fire Protection.rvt. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. to which you add various parameters. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 13 Using the same method. for Sprinkler Zone. select Zone 1. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Units. click the Formatting tab. Obstructed-Combustible. enter Light. select Feet and fractional inches. Click OK. 14 Select the new header. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 6 Using the same method. select To the nearest 1'. select Maximum Spacing. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Name. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Fire Protection. and on the ribbon. and click Field Format. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Group parameter under.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. click Add Parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 10 In the Format dialog. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Fire Protection Plan . select Spaces. enter Maximum Spacing. The schedule displays. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Type of Parameter. 11 Click OK twice. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. select Length. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Schedule keys. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Protection Area Construction Type.Design is highlighted. double-click on each column separator. For Rounding. 9 On the Formatting tab. 7 Click OK. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Key name. for Name. enter 15. Click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .

For Name. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter Sprinkler Schedule. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter 130. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. under Available fields. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Click OK. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. and press Enter. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.

select Sprinkler Zone. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. click . 22 Click OK twice. select 0 decimal place. for Sorting/Grouping. select Area.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Common. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. for Sort by. select Number. select Level. Click OK. Select Header and Blank line. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Fixed. and click OK. 19 Click the Formatting tab. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Type. click Edit. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Formula. and click View Properties. For Units. select Minimum Sprinklers. enter Minimum Sprinklers. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . under Other. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Discipline. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. In the Fields dialog. For Rounding. and click Field Format. For Then by. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).

select Grand totals. select Hidden field. verify that Use default settings is selected. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Under Field formatting. 30 Click OK twice. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. and click View Properties. 27 In the drawing area. and select Totals only. select Number. and then select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone. click Edit. select Level equals Level 2. ■ In the Format dialog. For Then by (second instance). 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. and then click Field Format. for Filter by. right-click the schedule. select Level.

36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. delete the word Maximum. select Calculate totals. click Edit. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sprinklers. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Embedded Schedule. select Grand totals. select Embedded Schedule. for Available fields. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. double-click Type. For Category. and Count. and click View Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. under Other. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Formatting tab. System Name. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Under Field formatting. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and select Totals only. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers.

and access the instance properties. 44 In the schedule. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select Light. but their values are not determined. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select Ordinary. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 52 Click OK. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. double-click FP . 46 With the space still selected. 50 Access the instance properties. select Ordinary. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Fire Protection Plan Design. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 43 Click Cancel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Protection Area Construction Type. As a result. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the floor plan. Unobstructed. Unobstructed. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 41 In the plan view. for Protection Area Construction Type.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. At the end of this tutorial. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. click Training Files. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and double-click Level 2 . you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. 279 . After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. By following the recommended workflow. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. you will understand the process.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. methodology. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. However. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. If the tutorial training files are not present. As you create the system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you place the sprinklers. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.autodesk.

and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When there is a small misalignment. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When this happens. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 3 In the Project Browser.

Pendent . 9 In space Instruction 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and select Sprinkler . select the sprinklers that you placed. 11 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 10 Press Esc twice. and click to place 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.

as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Also. and then press Esc. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Next. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

25 Click OK. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point.Fire Protection Plan . 23 Right-click the sprinkler. enter 10' 6". open Design ➤ FP . it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Design. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 17 In the Project Browser. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 18 Type WT. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 19 In the floor plan. you place non-hosted sprinklers. enter 14' 6". 200B. for Offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. under Constraints. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.FP_Ceiling view. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. For Number. and press Enter. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. Next. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. move the cursor to the right. and click Element Properties. specify a vertical offset. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 29 Press Esc.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . you adjust the offset. and 200C). enter 11. Notice that the schedule updates. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This number is determined in the schedule.

After creating the logical connection. However. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. Unlike logical connections (systems).rvt. and with piping (physical connection). Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. In this exercise. click Training Files. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan . and then creating the logical connection between these system components.

Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. as shown. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 5 Right-click the header. click View ➤ Systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. named Fire Protection Wet.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. In the System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and select Piping. within the Piping Systems folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 In the System Browser. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. system equipment. 11 With the system still selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select an initial piping layout. select Branch. press Tab. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and click Select. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. indicating the logical connection. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that 9' 0" is specified. The Generate Layout tools are activated. For Pipe Type. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Next. 19 Click OK. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. for System Name. 15 In the drawing area. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.Wet is selected. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In the left pane. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. For Offset. The Edit Piping System panel displays. click Settings. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. and number of elements in the system. verify that Main is selected. and select the system. providing system editing tools. and a piping layout preview displays.

In general. verify that Network is selected. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. and select solution 5. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. When the layout is finished. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. for Diameter. enter -12' 0". as shown. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 22 On the Options Bar. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Offset. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Place Base. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. select 2". The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run.

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 29 Click Finish Layout. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. On the Generate Layout panel. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. as shown. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . or that offset elevations are incorrect. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and then you create piping to physically connect them. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. the Connect Into tool. 32 If necessary. Next. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and various manual pipe creation tools.

Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.rvt. click Training Files. 3 If necessary. 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 5 In the drawing area. you can select the pipe or duct. click Add To System. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. verify that Solutions is selected. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. for Solution Type. 14 Close the System Browser. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and select solution 5. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. or a system component to display system tools.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 18 Click Finish Editing System. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. 13 Click Finish Layout. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 8 In the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and pipe or duct is created. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. air terminals. 9 On the Edit System panel. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. radiators. verify that Network is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. mechanical equipment.

22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 25 Select the sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. for Offset. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 21 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.20 Open Design ➤ FP . right-click.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar. select 9'. 29 Using the same method. 24 In the Piping Plan.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and then tile the views. and click Draw Pipe. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and then press Esc. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 28 In the drawing area. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.

zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the whole system highlights. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. ■ 6 Press Esc.Design is highlighted. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 4 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. for Scale. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Plan .

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. select 4". for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and maximize the floor plan. 26 Using the same method. as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. 23 Close the 3D view. for Diameter. select 1 1/4". 25 On the Options Bar.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 24 In the drawing area. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. For additional practice.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. you created a wet fire protection system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this tutorial.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. 305 .

306 .

and apply a view template. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. If the view included detail graphics. and view references. dependent views. matchlines. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.rvt. right-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Rename. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. 3 In the Rename View dialog. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. 307 . Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.

The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 9 Click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. In the left pane of the Open dialog. views and put them on the sheet.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click OK. more focused.rvt. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. create dependent views for areas B and C. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and then press Esc. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click Apply Default View Template. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 10 In the drawing area. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. as shown. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 6 In the Project Browser.

Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select 11.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 13 Press Esc twice. on the Options Bar. select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Pattern./ ---). and click OK. for Target view. In the Color dialog. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Click OK. 21 Using the same method. 20 Select the upper view reference and. and then press Esc. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. click the current value. 19 In the drawing area. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select black. For Line Weight.

crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 25 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 27 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.

Domestic Water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and select the section box. For Sub-Discipline. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. right-click 3D Plumbing. right-click Plumbing Isometric . enter Plumbing Isometric . Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Graphics. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Properties. and click to select it. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. For Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in. The section crop lines no longer display. 4 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.29 Close the file with or without saving it. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. for View Name. click Training Files. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Plumbing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. for View Classification. Click OK. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . select Plumbing Isometric. select Documentation.

9 Right-click. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. For Pattern. and click to select it. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. press Tab 3 times. select 3. Click Apply. and then click OK. select Dash. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 12 Using the same method.

press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . 14 Right-click.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.

and click to select it. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . On the View Control Bar. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. press Tab 3 times. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water view with detailing. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously.15 Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Right-click. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar.

and then place the callout view on a sheet. verify that Common is selected. In the Format dialog. 21 Click OK twice. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Creating Callout Views | 315 .Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. When the view is associated with a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. click on the Format value. for Rounding. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. For Slope. select To the nearest 1/8". 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.

for Scale.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4"=1'-0''. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.

using the same method.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Click OK. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. double-click M601 . 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. under Sheets (all).

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and select the viewport. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click OK. for View Name. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and click Apply Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Title on Sheet. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Rename. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 26 In the Rename View dialog.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 In the Project Browser. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. under Names.

and annotation to create a legend. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. 321 . symbols. duct tags. linetypes.

Creating Annotations In this exercise. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 8 With the text still selected. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.rvt. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.

9 Press Esc twice. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct. select a supply diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. and then click Right Straight. 16 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 323 . as shown. verify that Leader is cleared. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a segment of round duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a return diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click Open. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa. If necessary. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 20 In the Tags dialog. under Category. 24 On the Options Bar.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 17 Click Modify. 22 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 21 In the Load Family dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. clear Leader. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. click Load. for Ducts. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click OK.

select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 26 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. Creating Annotations | 325 . Leader. as shown. 32 In the drawing area. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar.25 In the drawing area. select Horizontal. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. as shown. 34 In the drawing area.

Creating Dimensions | 327 . and all elements of that type are affected. and lock lighting fixtures. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. for Leader Arrowhead. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. select the last tag placed. select Dot Open 1/16". Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and click OK. not simply an instance property. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 37 In the drawing area. lay out. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Using the method learned previously. you use temporary dimensions to locate. That’s because you changed a type property.36 Press Esc twice.

3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. On the Options Bar. and then select the interior face of the wall. click Training Files. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 12 Press Esc. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.rvt. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. indicating that it’s the active view. select the dimension line. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.3 1/2"). 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Creating a Legend | 329 . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Because the dimensions are locked.13 Using the same method. and offset them 8' from the wall. Creating a Legend In this exercise. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . and notes. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 19 Using the same methods. and press Enter. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. enter 8'. 16 Press Esc. linework. annotation symbols.

Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.rvt. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. For Scale. select Floor Plan. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click below the title to place the diffuser.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .8 Neck. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter Diffuser Legend. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area. Click OK. For View. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 10 Using the same method.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . select 1/4" = 1' -0". select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click Training Files.

and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 331 . 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 26 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 24 Select the component’s break line. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP and its text note. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 21 Press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . The selected detail lines are now thin.

34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. enter E. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Creating a Legend | 333 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.30 Select Spot Elevation . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected.

rvt. A drafting view using detail components. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.Detailing 15 In this lesson. indicating that it’s the active view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.113 East elevation view. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. 335 . Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A detail callout that references another view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. detail groups. and text.

Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and click to place it.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 4 On the Options Bar.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then modify and align the views. 8 Using the same method. Next. select each of the 2 panelboards. place Power Riser . 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 East on the sheet. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 In the drawing area. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. clear Leader. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.

and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. giving the appearance of a single view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Press Esc. right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. select the 113 North view. under Identity Data. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 13 Right-click. and click Deactivate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click OK. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet.

20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. right-click. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click. as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 Press Esc. you add wiring to the diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and click Activate View. select the 113 East elevation view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 21 Using the drag control. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. In the next exercise. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.

click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and click OK. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). for Name. and then click OK.113 North view. verify that Chain is selected. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 2 Close the Project Browser. expand Lines. indicating that it’s the active view. select 6. as shown. for Line Weight. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. enter Electrical Power.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. As you draw. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . In the New Subcategory dialog. In the Line Styles dialog. Under Modify Subcategories.rvt. click New. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . notice that there are no snaps active. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 8 On the Options Bar.

11 Using the same method. for Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8".10 Press Esc. as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

so that the result is as shown. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

28 Click above the cap. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 29 Click Modify. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.31 While pressing Ctrl. select Multiple. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

and then press Esc. enter 0 0. 40 Press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. You enter exact values for each line length. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. enter 3/32". and press Enter. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.36 Press Esc.5. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

49 In the Create Detail Group dialog.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. click on the length dimension value. 47 In the drawing area. for Name. select all 3 lines.25. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. you can ensure that they stay together. enter Ground. and then press Esc. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 46 In the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. enter 0 0. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view.125. Using the same method. 50 With the group selected. and click OK. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and press Enter. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Press Esc. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser.

and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 52 Select the detail group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group.51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.

2 Right-click the copy. and click OK. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Rename. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 4 Right-click the ViewCube. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In later exercises. click Training Files. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally.rvt. and will place it on sheet E01. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

7 On the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.6 Select the section box. and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. Back. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . click Home.

select 3D HVAC Iso. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. right-click. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Walkthroughs. Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click Apply View Template. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Under Names. select 3D Views.

Move the cursor down and to the left. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. and click to specify the second leader point. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Typical. 15 Using the same method. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 19 Complete the text labels. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. (Right).

26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. 23 Click on the crop region.To rotate and reposition a text label. 25 Click OK. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.

rvt. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Scale. 3 In the Project Browser. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select the isometric view. right-click the view name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. click Training Files. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select 3" = 1'-0". you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Properties. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place a detail component. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. In the left pane of the Open dialog.29 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .

for Sub-Discipline. 13 In the drawing area.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Click OK. 9 Zoom in to the component. select Plumbing. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. click the point at the top of the drain. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. For View Classification. select Documentation. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". as the rectangle start point. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). as shown. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 On the Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

and click OK. (Line). click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. Concrete. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. and then press Esc.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .I. 22 Click Modify. 21 In the drawing area. for Type. 18 With the filled region still selected. select the filled region. select C. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 23 In the drawing area. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.P. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 31 On the Options Bar. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.28 Click Modify. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click to select them.

Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 45 Using the method learned previously. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .38 Pan to the other end of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. as shown. and then press Esc. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region.

52 In the Create Group dialog. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.. and click OK. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. enter Flashing Membrane_F.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 49 Click Modify. draw wide detail lines as shown.D. select the Flashing Membrane group. press Tab to highlight the chain. for Name. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and then click to select them. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.55 Press Esc. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.

64 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and then click OK. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 71 Click Modify.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.62 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar. 72 If necessary. as shown. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 80 Press Esc twice. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 . and click to place it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 88 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. select the view title. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For Colors.dwg.rvt. For Layers. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. for Line Weight. Click OK. you import a CAD detail drawing. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For A-----NPP. select Black and White. select Auto-Detect. select 3.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. select Visible. Click Open. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. For Import units. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. click Training Files. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.

8 Type ZF. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 In the drawing area. 11 Press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . select the viewport title. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and then press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful